Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................5
Overview.....................................................................................................7
Using this guide.........................................................................................................................................7
Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................7
Additional printer setup...............................................................................9
Installing internal options..........................................................................................................................9
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................24
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................26
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................27
Networking..............................................................................................................................................28
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................34
Using C746x................................................................................................35
Learning about the printer......................................................................................................................35
Loading paper and specialty media.........................................................................................................38
Printing....................................................................................................................................................54
Managing your printer............................................................................................................................60
Using C748x................................................................................................69
Learning about the printer......................................................................................................................69
Setting up and using the home screen applications................................................................................75
Loading paper and specialty media.........................................................................................................78
Printing....................................................................................................................................................95
Managing your printer..........................................................................................................................101
Paper and specialty media guidelines.......................................................109
Using specialty media............................................................................................................................109
Paper guidelines....................................................................................................................................111
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...........................................................................................115
Understanding the printer menus............................................................118
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................118
Supplies menu.......................................................................................................................................119
Contents 2
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................121
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................131
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................132
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................145
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................149
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................171
Saving money and the environment.........................................................173
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display.....................................................................................173
Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................173
Recycling................................................................................................................................................174
Maintaining the printer............................................................................176
Ordering parts and supplies..................................................................................................................176
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies...........................................................................................177
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................177
Replacing parts and supplies.................................................................................................................178
Resetting the maintenance counter......................................................................................................183
Cleaning printer parts............................................................................................................................184
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................186
Clearing jams............................................................................................188
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................188
Understanding jam numbers and locations..........................................................................................189
200–201 paper jams..............................................................................................................................190
202–203 paper jams..............................................................................................................................195
24x paper jam........................................................................................................................................199
250 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................200
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................201
Solving basic printer problems..............................................................................................................201
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................201
Solving printing problems.....................................................................................................................217
Solving home screen application problems...........................................................................................221
Solving option problems........................................................................................................................222
Solving paper feed problems.................................................................................................................224
Solving print quality problems..............................................................................................................226
Contents 3
Solving color quality problems..............................................................................................................238
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................241
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................241
Notices.....................................................................................................242
Product information..............................................................................................................................242
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................242
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................247
Index........................................................................................................257
Contents 4
Safety information
Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or other types of surge or UPS devices. The power rating capacity of these types of
accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance, property
damage, or potential fire.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided
with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public
switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
Safety information 5
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the interior or exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before
proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as
the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 6
Overview
Using this guide
This User’s Guide provides general and specific information on using the printer models that are listed on the cover
page.
The following chapters contain information applicable to all printer models:
• Additional printer setup
• Paper and specialty media guidelines
• Understanding printer menus
• Saving money and the environment
• Maintaining the printer
• Clearing jams
• Troubleshooting
To find instructions for your printer:
• Use the table of contents.
• Use the Search function or the Find toolbar of your application to search for page content.
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
• Loading paper
• Configuring printer settings
• Viewing and printing documents and photos
• Setting up and using the printer software
• Configuring the printer on a network
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Overview 7
What are you looking for? Find it here
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
• Documentation
• Driver downloads
• Live chat support
• E‑mail support
• Voice support
Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
• Machine Type number
• Serial number
• Date purchased
• Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Overview 8
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
• Memory cards
– Printer memory
– Flash memory
– Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Bar Code
– IPDS
– PrintCryption
TM
• Printer hard disk
• Lexmark
TM
Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– RS‑232‑C Serial ISP
– Parallel 1284‑B ISP
– MarkNet
TM
N8250 802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP
– MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP
Note: An external kit is needed to support the ISP.
Accessing the system board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 9
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
1 Remove the system board cover.
a Turn the screws on the cover counterclockwise to loosen them, but do not remove them. Pull the standard tray
to access the two bottom screws.
b Slide the cover slightly up until each screw is in the keyhole.
c Pull the cover to remove it.
2 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Additional printer setup 10
1
2
4
3
5
1 Firmware and flash memory card connectors
2 Printer hard disk connector
3 Internal print server connector
4 Memory card connector
5 Dust cover
3 Reattach the system board cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
a Align the keyholes with the screws.
Additional printer setup 11
b Slide the cover down, and then turn each screw clockwise to tighten.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the system board” on page 9.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
Additional printer setup 12
3 Open the memory card connector latches.
4 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
1
2
Additional printer setup 13
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place, and then push the latches to firmly attach
the card into the connector.
1
2
2
6 Reattach the system board cover.
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed,
but the connectors are interchangeable.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and
unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the system board” on page 9.
2 Unpack the card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the system board.
1
2
Additional printer setup 14
4 Push the card firmly into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to damage the connectors.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
5 Reattach the system board cover.
Note: When the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options
in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options
in the print driver” on page 27.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 15
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the system board” on page 9.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the ISP kit.
2
3
4
1
1 ISP solution
2 Screws for the ISP solution
3 Screw for the plastic bracket
4 Plastic bracket
3 Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned.
Note: If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed, then remove it first. For more information, see
“Removing a printer hard disk” on page 23.
Additional printer setup 16
4 Remove the screws, and then remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
1
2
5 Attach the ISP solution to the system board.
a Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board.
b Hold the edges of the ISP and guide it to the opening on the system board cage, and then gently allow it to rest
on the plastic tee.
Additional printer setup 17
c Use the provided screw to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP solution.
6 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the color‑coded receptacle on the system board.
Additional printer setup 18
7 Firmly connect the ISP solution to the system board cage using the two screws.
8 Reattach the system board cover.
Note: If you have removed an optional printer hard disk while installing the Internal Solutions Port, then
reinstall the printer hard disk first before reattaching the system board cover. For more information, see
“Installing a printer hard disk” on page 19.
Installing a printer hard disk
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the system board” on page 9.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
3 Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned.
Additional printer setup 19
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
a
Using a flathead screwdriver, loosen the screws.
b Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
c Install the printer hard disk onto the ISP:
1 Hold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly, and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk
to the holes in the ISP.
2 Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage to
the hard disk.
d Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 20
To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board:
a
Hold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly, and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to
the holes in the system board. Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause
damage to the hard disk.
Additional printer setup 21
b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
4 Reattach the system board cover.
Additional printer setup 22
Removing a printer hard disk
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see
“Accessing the system board” on page 9.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard
disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling
the cable out.
3 Remove the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the system board cage.
Additional printer setup 23
4 Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.
5 Set the printer hard disk aside.
6 Reattach the system board cover.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb), and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any optional drawers in the following order:
• Optional 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
• Optional 550-sheet drawer
• Optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer
• Printer
For information on installing an optional drawer, see the setup documentation that came with the option.
Warning—Potential Damage: The trays in the optional 550-sheet drawer and the optional 550-sheet specialty media
drawer are not interchangeable.
Additional printer setup 24
Installing optional drawers
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off
as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Unpack the optional drawer, and then remove all packing material.
Note: Optional drawers lock together when stacked. Remove stacked drawers one at a time from the top to the
bottom.
2 Place the drawer near the printer.
3 Turn off the printer.
4 Align the printer with the drawer, and then lower the printer into place.
1
2
3
1 Optional 550‑sheet specialty media drawer
2 Optional 550‑sheet drawer
Additional printer setup 25
3 Optional 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
5 Turn the printer back on.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such
as a power cord, a fax feature, or USB cable, during a lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB or Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown
while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
1
2
1 USB port
2 Ethernet port
Additional printer setup 26
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
2 Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b Type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3 Apply the changes.
Additional printer setup 27
Networking
Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X - RADIUS are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
• A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
• The network gateway
• The network mask
• A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
• Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
– 802.1X–RADIUS
Additional printer setup 28
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
• 802.1X user name and password
• Certificates
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.
Notes:
– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact
your system support person.
– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before installing the printer on a wireless network, make sure:
• Your wireless network is set up and is working properly.
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
1 Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
1
2
Note: Make sure the printer and the computer are fully on and ready.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.
Additional printer setup 29
2 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
• From our Web site:
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
3 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the
following:
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
a
Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
4 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
5 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.
6 From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup (Recommended).
Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.
7 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so
you can print wirelessly.
8 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Additional printer setup 30
Note: For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer, see the
Networking Guide.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Note: Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.
Prepare to configure the printer
1
Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
1
2
2 Locate the printer MAC address.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports > > Network Setup Page >
or
> Reports > Network Setup Page
b In the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).
Note: You will need this information later.
Enter the printer information
1
Access the AirPort options:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
• System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
2 From the Network Name pop‑up menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y’s are the last six digits of the MAC
address located on the MAC address sheet.
Additional printer setup 31
3 Open a Web browser.
4 From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.
5 Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double‑click the printer name.
Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.
6 From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the location of the wireless settings information.
Configure the printer for wireless access
1
Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).
3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network.
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network.
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on the computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
• System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
7 From the Network pop‑up menu, select the name of the wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in
the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
1 Install a printer driver file on the computer:
a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
• From our Web site:
Go to
http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system
b Double‑click the installer package for the printer.
c Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
d Select a destination, and then click Continue.
e From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
f Type the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary applications are installed in the computer.
g Click Close when the installation is complete.
Additional printer setup 32
2 Add the printer:
a For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan
• System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +.
3 If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.
4 Click the IP tab.
5 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
b For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:
• Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
• This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add.
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5 From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
6 From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Additional printer setup 33
Changing port settings after installing a new network ISP
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes.
• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the printer is disconnected from the Ethernet network.
For Windows users
1
Open the printers folder.
2 From the shortcut menu of the printer with the new ISP, open the printer properties.
3 Configure the port from the list.
4 Update the IP address.
5 Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1
From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to the list of printers, and then select + > IP.
2 Type the IP address in the address field.
3 Apply the changes.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option, and then install it again. For more information, see
“Printing a menu settings page” on
page 60 for non‑touch‑screen printer models, or “Printing a menu settings page” on page 101 for touch‑screen
printer models.
• Network setup page—If your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network, then print a
network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids
network printing configuration. For more information, see
“Printing a network setup page” on page 61 for
non‑touch screen printer models, or
“Printing a network setup page” on page 102 for touch‑screen printer models.
Additional printer setup 34
Using C746x
Learning about the printer
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature -40 to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
1
2
3
4
5
1 Right side 100 mm (3.9 in.)
2 Front 400 mm (15.7 in.)
Using C746x 35
3 Left side 150 mm (5.9 in.)
4 Rear 100 mm (3.9 in.)
5 Top 150 mm (5.9 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
You can configure your basic printer by adding up to three 550‑sheet optional drawers and a 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder. A caster base and a spacer are supported in any configurations.
Spacers are nonfunctional trays used to add height to a printer stack. A spacer must be placed:
• Directly on a caster base or table top
• At the bottom of all tray stacks and cannot be used with an optional 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity drawer.
For information on installing a spacer, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
5
9
1 Standard output bin
2 Paper support
3 Printer control panel
4 Optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer
5 Optional 550‑sheet drawer
6 Optional 2,000-sheet high‑capacity feeder
7 Caster base
8 Standard 550‑sheet drawer (Tray 1)
9 Multipurpose feeder
Using C746x 36
Using the four-arrow-button printer control panel
1
3
4
5
6
8
7
910
1
2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
7
PQR
8
STU
9
WXYZ
0
2
Use the To
1 Display View the printer status.
Allow printer setup and operation.
2 Select button Submit changes made in the printer settings.
3 Arrow buttons Scroll up and down, or left and right.
4 Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode.
The following are the statuses based on the indicator light and the Sleep button:
• Entering or waking from Sleep mode
– The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
– The Sleep button is unilluminated.
• Operating in Sleep mode
– The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
– The Sleep button is illuminated solid amber.
• Entering or waking from Hibernate mode
– The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
– The Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber.
• Operating in Hibernate mode
– The indicator light is unilluminated.
– The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0.1 second, and then goes completely unilluminated
for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:
• Pressing any hard button
• Opening Tray 1 or loading paper in the multipurpose feeder
• Opening a door or cover
• Sending a print job from the computer
• Performing a power‑on reset with the main power switch
• Attaching a device to a USB port
6 Stop or Cancel
button
Stop all printer activity.
Note: A list of options is displayed once Stopped appears on the display.
7 Back button Return to the previous screen.
Using C746x 37
Use the To
8 Home button Go to the home screen.
9 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
• Off—The printer is off.
• Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
• Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
• Blinking red—The printer requires operator intervention.
10 USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see
“Avoiding jams” on page 188 and “Storing paper” on page 114.
Setting the paper size and type
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Paper Size/Type >
2 Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper tray or feeder, and then press .
3 Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper size, and then press .
4 Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper type, and then press to change the settings.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Notes:
• The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) and is loaded only in the multipurpose feeder.
• The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 1219.2 mm (8.5 x 48 in.) and is loaded only in the multipurpose
feeder.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Universal Setup > > Units of Measure > > select unit of
measure >
Using C746x 38
Loading the standard or an optional 550‑sheet tray
The printer has one standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and may have up to four optional 550‑sheet trays including the
special media tray. For narrow paper sizes such as A6 and envelopes, use the special media tray. For more information,
see
“Loading the optional 550‑sheet special media tray” on page 42.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
1 Pull the tray completely out.
Notes:
• Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the printer display. Doing so may cause a
jam.
• The standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) does not automatically detect the paper size.
2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Notes:
• Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the length and width guides.
• Incorrect positioning of the width guide can cause paper jams.
Using C746x 39
3 Squeeze and slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Notes:
• For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze and slide the length guide backward to accommodate
their length.
• The length guide has a locking device. To unlock, slide to the left the button on top of the length guide. To
lock, slide the button to the right when a length is selected.
3
1
2
Using C746x 40
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5 Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.
Notes:
• When loading preprinted letterhead for one‑sided printing, place the header faceup toward the front of the
tray.
• When loading preprinted letterhead for two‑sided printing, place the header facedown toward the rear of
the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
LETTERHEAD
LETTERHEAD
Note: Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the left side of the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
6 Insert the tray.
Note: For some paper sizes, the tray will extend past the back of the printer.
Using C746x 41
7 From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Note: Paper jams may occur if the paper size and type settings selected do not match the paper loaded.
Loading the optional 550‑sheet special media tray
The optional 550‑sheet special media tray (Tray 2), unlike any other trays, supports narrow paper sizes such as envelopes
and A6.
1
2
3
4
1 Primary length guide
2 Length guide lock
3 Secondary length guide
4 Width guide
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
Using C746x 42
Notes:
• For instructions on loading paper sizes larger than A6 and envelopes, see “Loading the standard or an optional
550‑sheet tray” on page 39.
• For a complete list of supported paper sizes, see the “Supported paper sizes, types, and weights” section in the
User’s Guide.
Loading narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6
1
Pull the tray completely out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
2 Squeeze and slide the primary length guide toward you until it stops.
Notes:
• The length has a locking device. To unlock the length guide, slide to the left the button on top of the length
guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length has been selected.
• You can only slide the secondary length guide when the primary length guide reaches the edge of the width
guide.
Using C746x 43
1
2
3
3 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
1
2
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the width guide.
Using C746x 44
4 Squeeze and slide the secondary length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
1
2
Using C746x 45
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
6 Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.
Notes:
• Load envelopes with the stamp side entering the printer first.
• Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width
guide.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
Using C746x 46
7 Insert the tray.
8 From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Note: Return the secondary length guide back to its original position when loading long papers such as legal, letter,
and A4. Squeeze and slide the guide until it clicks into place.
Loading the 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
1 Pull the tray out.
2 Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Using C746x 47
3 Push the length guide button to the right to unlock the length guide.
4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide. Slide the guide to the correct position for the paper
size you are loading, and then lock the guide.
Using C746x 48
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
6 Load the paper stack:
• Printable side faceup for one‑sided printing
• Printable side facedown for two‑sided printing
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
LETTERHEAD
LETTERHEAD
• Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray may cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
7 Insert the tray.
Using C746x 49
Loading the multipurpose feeder
The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:
• 100 sheets of 75‑g/m
2
(20‑lb) paper
• 10 envelopes
• 75 transparencies
Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media while the printer prints from the multipurpose feeder or when
the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.
LTR&LGL EXEC A5
A4
B5
1
4
5
6
2
3
1 Maximum paper fill indicator
2 Tray release latch
3 Paper release lever
4 Paper size indicators
5 Paper width guide
6 Width guide release tab
1 Press the tray release latch to the left, and then pull the multipurpose feeder down.
Using C746x 50
2 Gently pull the extension out until it is fully extended.
3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
Paper
Envelopes
Transparencies*
* Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
Using C746x 51
4 Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
Notes:
• Make sure paper or specialty media does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
• Paper or specialty media should lie flat and fit loosely in the multipurpose feeder.
• If the paper or specialty media is pushed too far into the multipurpose feeder, then press the paper release
lever to remove it.
• Load envelopes with the flap on the right side and the stamp edge entering the printer first.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
Linking and unlinking trays
The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty, paper
feeds from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.
Linking and unlinking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Network/Ports
menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
Using C746x 52
3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see
“Setting the paper size and type” on page 38.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a new custom paper type name.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Custom Names
2 Select a custom name, and then type a new custom paper type name.
3 Press .
4 Press Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Using C746x 53
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Custom Types
2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3 Press .
Printing
Printing a document
Printing a document
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
Using C746x 54
3 Click Print.
Printing in black and white
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only >
Adjusting toner darkness
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Settings > > Print Settings > > Quality Menu > > Toner Darkness
2 Adjust the toner darkness, and then press .
Using Max Speed and Max Yield
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield
is the factory default setting.
• Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The printer
prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.
• Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color
mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as
four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.
Using C746x 55
3 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu
2 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
3 Press .
Printing from a flash drive or mobile device
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer control
panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
• A flash drive icon appears on the home screen and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is installed.
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory
device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A
loss of data can occur.
Using C746x 56
2 From the printer control panel, select the document you want to print.
3 Press the left or right arrow button to specify the number of copies for printing, and then press .
Notes:
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print
files from the flash drive as held jobs.
Supported flash drives and file types
Flash drive File type
• Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
• SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
Notes:
• Hi‑Speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Devices supporting only
USB low‑speed capabilities are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted
with New Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Documents:
• .pdf
• .xps
Images:
• .dcx
• .gif
• .JPEG or .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .TIFF or .tif
• .png
• .fls
Printing from a mobile device
To download a compatible mobile printing application, visit www.lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Using C746x 57
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Security > > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Print job type Description
Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are
deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer
control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.
Verify Job Expiration Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is
automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held until
deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2 Press .
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print.
Using C746x 58
6 From the printer control panel, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > select the print job > specify the number
of copies > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer control panel, release the print job:
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > select the print job > specify the number
of copies > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Reports > > Print Fonts
2 Press the up or down arrow button to select the font setting.
3 Press .
Note: The PPDS fonts appear only when the PPDS data stream is activated.
Printing a directory list
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > Reports > > Print Directory >
Note: The Print Directory menu item appears only when an optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed.
Using C746x 59
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, press .
2 When a list of print jobs appears, select the job to cancel, and then press .
3 Press to go back to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1
Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
For Macintosh users
1
From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Managing your printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as
four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Printing a menu settings page
Print a menu settings page to view the current menu settings and to verify if the printer options are installed correctly.
Using C746x 60
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > Reports > > Menu Settings Page >
Note: If you have not changed any menu settings, then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings.
Settings saved from the menus replace the factory default settings as user default settings. A user default setting
remains in effect until you access the menu again, select another value, and save it.
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > Reports > > Network Setup Page >
Note: If an optional internal print server is installed, then Print Network [x] Setup Page appears.
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Status/Supplies > View Supplies >
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as
four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Using C746x 61
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode.
3 Select a setting.
Use To
Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode.
Notes:
• Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default
settings.
• Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
Notes:
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. You may notice a short
delay before the first page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
• The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode.
• Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in
Sleep mode.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) printing feature.
4 Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Use Quiet Mode to reduce the printer noise.
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > Settings > > General Settings > > Quiet Mode > > select a setting you want
Using C746x 62
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
• Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document is
ready to print. There is a short delay before the first
page is printed.
• If your printer has faxing capability, then fax sounds are
reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax
speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.
• The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are
turned off.
• The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.
Off Use factory default settings. This setting supports the
performance specifications of the printer.
Note: Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable
Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full
speed printing.
2 Press .
Adjusting Sleep mode
1 From the control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Settings > > General Settings > > Timeouts > > Sleep Mode >
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3 Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power saving mode.
Notes:
• Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
• Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long press of
the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1 From the control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Settings > > General Settings >
2 Select Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button, and then press .
3 Press Hibernate > .
Using C746x 63
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see
“Printing a menu settings page” on page 60.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see
“Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 65.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > Settings > > General Settings > > Factory Defaults > > Restore Now >
Securing the printer
Locking the system board
To lock access to the system board, attach a security lock to the printer in the location identified in the illustration. The
printer is compatible with most laptop computer security locks.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store printer and network settings, and user data.
Types of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple
print and copy jobs.
Non-volatile
memory
Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both
types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and
bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
Using C746x 64
Types of memory Description
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for device-specific
functionality. This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs,
as well as form data and font data.
Erase the contents of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
• The printer is being decommissioned.
• The printer hard disk is being replaced.
• The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, turn off the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the printer displays a list of functions.
Using C746x 65
3 Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe All Settings appears.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4 Navigate to:
Back > Exit Config Menu
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
• Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
• Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left
by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3 Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe Disk appears, and then select one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4 Press the up or down arrow button until Yes appears, and then proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5 Navigate to:
Back > Exit Config Menu
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Using C746x 66
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3 From the Disk Encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3 Navigate to:
Disk Encryption > Enable
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Select Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the screen for enabling or disabling disk encryption.
5 Navigate to:
Back > Exit Config Menu
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Using C746x 67
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.
2 Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide.
Using C746x 68
Using C748x
Learning about the printer
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature -40 to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
1
2
3
4
5
1 Right side 100 mm (3.9 in.)
2 Front 400 mm (15.7 in.)
Using C748x 69
3 Left side 150 mm (5.9 in.)
4 Rear 100 mm (3.9 in.)
5 Top 150 mm (5.9 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
You can configure your basic printer by adding up to three 550‑sheet optional drawers and a 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder. A caster base and a spacer are supported in any configurations.
Spacers are nonfunctional trays used to add height to a printer stack. Spacers must be:
• Placed directly on a caster base or table top
• Placed at the bottom of all tray stacks, and cannot be used with an optional 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity drawer.
For information on installing a spacer, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
5
8
1 Standard output bin
2 Paper support
3 Printer control panel
4 Optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer
5 Optional 550‑sheet drawer
6 Optional 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
7 Caster base
8 Standard 550‑sheet drawer (Tray 1)
9 Multipurpose feeder
Using C748x 70
Using the touch‑screen printer control panel
1
2 34
67 5
1
2
ABC
3
DEF
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
7
PQR
8
STU
9
WXYZ
0
Use the To
1 Display View the printer status.
Allow printer setup and operation.
2 Home button Return to the home screen.
3 Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
4 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode.
The following are the statuses based on the indicator light and the Sleep button:
• Entering or waking from Sleep mode
– The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
– The sleep button is unilluminated.
• Operating in Sleep mode
– The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
– The sleep button is illuminated solid amber.
• Entering or waking from Hibernate mode
– The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
– The sleep button is illuminated blinking amber.
• Operating in Hibernate mode
– The indicator light is unilluminated.
– The sleep button is blinking amber for 0.1 of a second, then goes completely unilluminated
for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:
• Touching the screen or pressing any hard button
• Opening Tray 1 or loading paper in the multipurpose feeder
• Opening a door or cover
• Sending a print job from the computer
• Performing a power‑on reset with the main power switch
• Attaching a device to a USB port
5 Stop or Cancel
button
Stop all printer activity.
Note: A list of options is displayed when Stopped appears on the display.
Using C748x 71
Use the To
6 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
• Off—The printer is off.
• Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
• Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
• Blinking red—The printer requires operator intervention.
7 USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action.
Note: Your home screen, icons, and the buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
2 3
5678
4
123.123.123.123
1
Touch To
1 Change Language Change the primary language of the printer.
2 Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URLs) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view does not include bookmarks created within Forms and Favorites, and
the ones in the tree are not usable in Forms and Favorites.
3 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
4 USB or USB
Thumbdrive
View, select, or print photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card
or flash drive is connected to the printer.
5 Menus Access printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
6 Status message bar
• Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Fuser missing or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.
Using C748x 72
Touch To
7 Status/Supplies
• Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to
continue processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
8 Tips View a context‑sensitive help information.
This may also appear on the home screen:
Touch To
Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs.
Features
Feature Description
Attendance message alert
If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Warning
If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
Example: 123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home
screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the
IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely
configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Sample touch screen
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Using C748x 73
Touch To
1 Up arrow
Scroll up.
2 Delete folder
Delete the file you selected.
3 Left arrow
Scroll to the left.
4 Right arrow
Scroll to the right.
5 Right scroll increase
Scroll to another value in increasing order.
6 Left scroll decrease
Scroll to another value in decreasing order.
7 Down arrow
Scroll down.
8 Accept
Save a setting.
9 Cancel
• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Cancel out a screen and return to the previous screen.
Using C748x 74
Touch To
10 Back
Navigate back to the previous screen.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
• Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in some printer models.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
The Embedded Web Server page appears.
Showing or hiding icons on the home screen
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
A list of basic printer functions appears.
3 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.
Note: Cleared check box items are hidden.
4 Click Submit.
Using C748x 75
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see
“Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 75.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1 Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2 Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
• Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
• Other Applications—This lets you find information about the other applications.
3 Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Using Background and Idle Screen
Icon Description
The application lets you customize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Change Background > select background to use
2 Touch .
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Icon Description
The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print
frequently used online forms directly from the home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
Using C748x 76
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.
3 Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Understanding Eco‑Settings
Icon Description
The application lets you easily manage energy consumption, noise, toner, and paper usage settings to
help reduce the environmental impact of your printer.
Understanding Showroom
Icon Description
The application lets you create and display a customized slide show on the touch screen of your printer.
You can load images either from a flash drive or through the printer Embedded Web Server.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.
Using C748x 77
3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC
Applet.
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Export or import a configuration file for one or multiple applications.
For one application
a
Navigate to:
Settings > Apps > Apps Management > select an application > Configure
b Export or import the configuration file.
Notes:
• If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
• If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
For multiple applications
a
Click Settings > Import/Export.
b Export or import a configuration file.
Note: When importing a configuration file, click Submit to complete the process.
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
see
“Avoiding jams” on page 188 and “Storing paper” on page 114.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Using C748x 78
Notes:
• The smallest supported Universal size is 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) and loaded only in the multipurpose feeder.
• The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 1219.2 mm (8.5 x 48 in.) and loaded only in the multipurpose
feeder.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select the unit of measure >
2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3 Select the width or height, and then touch .
Loading the standard or an optional 550‑sheet tray
The printer has one standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and may have up to four optional 550‑sheet trays including the
special media tray. For narrow paper sizes such as A6 and envelopes, use the special media tray. For more information,
see
“Loading the optional 550‑sheet special media tray” on page 82.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull the tray completely out.
Notes:
• Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
• The standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) does not automatically detect the paper size.
Using C748x 79
2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Notes:
• Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the length and width guides.
• Incorrect positioning of the width guide can cause paper jams.
3 Squeeze and slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Notes:
• For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze and slide the length guide backward to accommodate
their length.
• The length guide has a locking device. To unlock, slide to the left the button on top of the length guide. To
lock, slide the button to the right when a length is selected.
Using C748x 80
3
1
2
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5 Load the paper stack toward the back of the tray with the recommended printable side faceup.
Notes:
• When loading preprinted letterhead for one‑sided printing, place the letterhead faceup toward the front of
the tray.
• When loading preprinted letterhead for two‑sided printing, place the letterhead facedown toward the rear
of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided (Duplex) printing
LETTERHEAD
LETTERHEAD
Note: Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the left side of the tray.
Using C748x 81
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
6 Insert the tray.
Note: For some paper sizes, the tray will extend past the back of the printer.
7 From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Loading the optional 550‑sheet special media tray
The optional 550‑sheet special media tray (Tray 2) supports narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6.
Using C748x 82
1
2
3
4
1 Primary length guide
2 Length guide lock
3 Secondary length guide
4 Width guide
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
Notes:
• For instructions on loading paper sizes larger than A6 and envelopes, see “Loading the standard or an optional
550‑sheet tray” on page 79.
• For a complete list of supported paper sizes, see the "Supported paper sizes, types, and weights" section in the
User's Guide.
Loading narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6
1
Pull the tray completely out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Using C748x 83
2 Squeeze and slide the primary length guide toward you until it stops.
Notes:
• The length has a locking device. To unlock the length guide, slide to the left the button on top of the length
guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length has been selected.
• You can only slide the secondary length guide when the primary length guide reaches the edge of the width
guide.
1
2
3
Using C748x 84
3 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
1
2
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the width guide.
Using C748x 85
4 Squeeze and slide the secondary length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
1
2
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
6 Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.
Notes:
• Load envelopes with the stamp side entering the printer first.
• Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width
guide.
Using C748x 86
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
7 Insert the tray.
8 From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Note: Return the secondary length guide to its original position when loading long papers such as legal, letter, and
A4. Squeeze and slide the guide until it clicks into place.
Using C748x 87
Loading the 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull the tray out.
2 Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
3 Unlock the length guide.
Using C748x 88
4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide. Slide the guide to the correct position for the paper
size you are loading, and then lock the guide.
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
6 Load the paper stack:
• Printable side faceup for one‑sided printing
• Printable side facedown for two‑sided printing
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
LETTERHEAD
LETTERHEAD
Using C748x 89
• Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray may cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
7 Insert the tray.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:
• 100 sheets of 75‑g/m
2
(20‑lb) paper
• 10 envelopes
• 75 transparencies
Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media while the printer prints from the multipurpose feeder or when
the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.
Using C748x 90
LTR&LGL E
XEC A5
A
4
B5
1
4
5
6
2
3
1 Maximum paper fill indicator
2 Tray release latch
3 Paper release lever
4 Paper size indicators
5 Paper width guide
6 Width guide release tab
1 Press the tray release latch to the left, and then pull the multipurpose feeder down.
2 Gently pull the extension out until it is fully extended.
3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
Using C748x 91
Paper
Envelopes
Transparencies*
* Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful
not to scratch them.
4 Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
Notes:
• Make sure paper or specialty media does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
• Paper or specialty media should lie flat and fit loosely in the multipurpose feeder.
• If the paper or specialty media is pushed too far into the multipurpose feeder, then press the paper release
lever to remove it.
• Load envelopes with the flap on the right side up and the stamp edge entering the printer first.
Using C748x 92
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5 From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the feeder based on the paper you
loaded.
Linking and unlinking trays
The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty, paper
feeds from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.
Linking and unlinking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
• To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
• To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4 Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see
“Setting the paper size and type” on page 78.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Using C748x 93
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4 Click Submit.
5 Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2 Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3 Touch .
4 Touch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2 Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3 Touch .
Using C748x 94
Printing
Printing forms
Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed.
Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see
“Setting up Forms and
Favorites” on page 76.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2 Apply the changes.
Printing a document
Printing a document
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Printing in black and white
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only >
Using C748x 95
Adjusting toner darkness
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness setting.
4 Click Submit.
Using Max Speed and Max Yield
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield
is the factory default setting.
• Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The printer
prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.
• Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color
mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.
3 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu
2 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
3 Touch .
Using C748x 96
Printing from a flash drive or mobile device
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer control
panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
• A flash drive icon appears on the home screen and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is installed.
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory
device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A
loss of data can occur.
Using C748x 97
2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing, and then touch Print.
Notes:
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print
files from the flash drive as held jobs.
Supported flash drives and file types
Flash drive File type
• Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
• SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
Notes:
• Hi‑Speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Devices supporting only
USB low‑speed capabilities are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted
with New Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Documents:
• .pdf
• .xps
Images:
• .dcx
• .gif
• .JPEG or .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .TIFF or .tif
• .png
• .fls
Printing from a mobile device
To download a compatible mobile printing application, visit www.lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Using C748x 98
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Print job type Description
Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the
printer control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.
Verify Job Expiration Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job
is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held
until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
• All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2 Touch .
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print.
Using C748x 99
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Using C748x 100
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press
on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1
Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
For Macintosh users
1
From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2 From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Managing your printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
Using C748x 101
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.
Using C748x 102
Saving energy
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power saving mode.
Notes:
• Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
• Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long press of
the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.
3 Touch Hibernate > .
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode.
3 Select a setting.
Use To
Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode.
Notes:
• Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default
settings.
• Off supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
Notes:
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. You may notice a short
delay before the first page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
• The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode.
• Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in
Sleep mode.
Using C748x 103
Use To
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) printing feature.
4 Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
• Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There will be a short delay before
the first page is printed.
Off Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
3 Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3 Apply the changes.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see
“Printing a menu settings page” on page 101.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see
“Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 106.
Using C748x 104
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >
Securing the printer
Locking the system board
To limit access to the system board, attach a security lock to the printer in the location identified in the illustration. The
printer is compatible with most laptop computer security locks.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Types of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM)
to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy
jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality. This lets
the device retain buffered user data from complex scan, print,
copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Using C748x 105
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
• The printer is being decommissioned.
• The printer hard disk is being replaced.
• The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Using C748x 106
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
• Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
• Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left
by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable the hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Using C748x 107
Notes:
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or
Fax.
3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.
2 Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide.
Using C748x 108
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Notes:
• Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel.
• Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.
• The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
• For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark support Web
site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Using specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser/LED printers.
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Before loading letterhead, flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source One‑ or two‑sided
printing
Printable side Paper orientation
Standard and optional trays One‑sided Load preprinted
letterhead faceup.
Place the top edge of the
sheet with the header
toward the front of the
tray.
Standard and optional trays Two‑sided Load preprinted
letterhead facedown.
Place the top edge of the
sheet with the header
toward the rear of the tray.
Multipurpose feeder One‑sided Load preprinted
letterhead facedown.
When loading in short-
edge orientation, place
the top edge of the sheet
with the header toward
the rear of the
multipurpose feeder.
When loading in long-edge
orientation, place the top
edge of the sheet with the
header on the left of the
multipurpose feeder.
Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided Load preprinted
letterhead faceup.
Place the top edge of the
sheet with the header
toward the front of the
multipurpose feeder.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable
for laser/LED printers.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 109
Tips on using transparencies
• Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Feed transparencies from the multipurpose feeder only.
• From the Paper menu, set the MP Feeder Type to Transparency.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures
of 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
• Before loading transparencies, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• We recommend Lexmark transparencies. For ordering information, see the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m
2
(24‑lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes
must not exceed 70‑g/m
2
(20‑lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist.
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
– Have an interlocking design.
– Have postage stamps attached.
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
– Have bent corners.
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
The printer supports the following types of labels designed for laser/LED printers:
• One‑sided paper labels
• Vinyl, pharmacy, and double‑sided labels
• Vertical marketing labels
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on
the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 110
When printing on labels:
• Use labels designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 225°C (437°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 225°C (437°F) if Label Weight is set to
Heavy. Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server, or from the Paper menu on the printer control
panel.
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the label.
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge,
and use a non‑oozing adhesive.
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.
• Use grain short card stock when possible.
Paper guidelines
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the
paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 111
Weight
The printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 90 g/m
2
(24 lb bond) grain long paper. The manual feeder
can automatically feed paper weights up to 163 g/m
2
(43 lb bond) grain long paper. Paper lighter than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb)
might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m
2
(20 lb bond) grain long
paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m
2
(24 lb) or heavier paper.
Note: Duplex printing is supported only for 60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100–300 Sheffield points;
smoothness between 150–250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
Paper and specialty media guidelines 112
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb)
• Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended print side. This information is usually indicated on the package.
• Do not use paper, paper labels, or card stock that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60–90 g/m
2
(16–24 lb) paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by
the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating
that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement
can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no
reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply
to recycled paper.
• Low moisture content (4–5%)
Paper and specialty media guidelines 113
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much
rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very
well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m
2
[16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause
paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing
conditions).
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.
• Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
• Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 114
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and weights of
paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Supported paper sizes
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
550‑sheet tray
Optional
550‑sheet tray
Optional
550‑sheet
specialty media
drawer
Optional
2,000‑sheet
high‑capacity
feeder
Multipurpose
feeder
Manual
paper
Manual
envelope
Duplex
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in.)
2 1 1 1 2 2
X
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)
2 1 2
X
2 2
X
A6
105 x 148 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in.)
XX
2
X
2 2
XX
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)
2 1 2
X
2 2
X
Letter
215.9 x 279.4 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
2 1 1 1 2 2
X
Legal
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
2 1 1 1 2 2
X
Executive
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
2 1 2
X
2 2
X
Oficio (México)
215.9 x 340.4 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
2 2 2
X
2 2
X
Folio
215.9 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
2 2 2
X
2 2
X
1
Source supports paper size with size sensing.
2
Source supports paper size without size sensing.
3
Paper size is supported if set to US.
4
Paper size is supported if set to metric.
5
Paper size is supported if its length is between 8.27 in. (210 mm) and 14 in. (355.6 mm); and its width is between 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)
in short‑edge loading orientation.
6
This size setting formats the envelope for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.
7
Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard media sizes.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 115
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
550‑sheet tray
Optional
550‑sheet tray
Optional
550‑sheet
specialty media
drawer
Optional
2,000‑sheet
high‑capacity
feeder
Multipurpose
feeder
Manual
paper
Manual
envelope
Duplex
Statement
139.7 x 215.9 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
XX
2
X
2 2
X
Universal
7
148 x 210 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
2 1
X
2 2
X
5
Universal
7
76.2 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in.) to
215.9 x 1219.2 mm
(8.5 x 48 in.)
XXXX
2
XX X
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98.4 x 190.5 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
XX
2
X
2
X
2
X
9 Envelope
98.4 x 226.1 mm
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)
XX
2
X
2
X
2
X
Com 10 Envelope
104.8 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)
XX
1
X
2
X
2
X
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)
XX
1
X
2
X
2
X
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
XX
1
X
2
X
2
X
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
XX
2
X
2
X
2
X
Other Envelope
6
85.7 x 165 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(3.375 x 6.50 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
XX
2
X
2
X
2
X
1
Source supports paper size with size sensing.
2
Source supports paper size without size sensing.
3
Paper size is supported if set to US.
4
Paper size is supported if set to metric.
5
Paper size is supported if its length is between 8.27 in. (210 mm) and 14 in. (355.6 mm); and its width is between 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and 8.5 in. (215.9 mm)
in short‑edge loading orientation.
6
This size setting formats the envelope for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.
7
Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard media sizes.
Paper and specialty media guidelines 116
Supported paper types and weights
The printer supports 60–220‑g/m
2
(16–58‑lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type Standard or
optional
550‑sheet tray
Optional
550‑sheet
specialty media
drawer
Optional
2,000‑sheet
high‑capacity
feeder
Multipurpose
feeder
Manual Paper Manual
Envelope
Duplex
Paper
• Plain
• Bond
• Colored
• Letterhead
• Preprinted
• Light
• Glossy
• Heavy
• Heavy Glossy
• Recycled
X
Card stock X XX
Transparencies
X XX
Labels
• Paper
• Vinyl
X XX
Envelopes X
X X X
Custom Type [x]
Rough/Cotton X
Paper and specialty media guidelines 117
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Supplies Menu Paper Menu Reports Settings
Replace Supply
Cyan Cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Cyan Photoconductor
Magenta Photoconductor
Yellow Photoconductor
Black Photoconductor
Waste Toner Bottle
Fuser
Transfer Module
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Universal Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
General Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Security Network/Ports Help
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Erase Temporary Data Files
1
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Active NIC
Standard Network or Network [x]
2
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Print All Guides
Color Quality
Print Quality
Printing Guide
Media Guide
Print Defects Guide
Menu Map
Information Guide
Connection Guide
Moving Guide
Supplies Guide
1
This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
2
Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network, Wireless Network, or Network [x].
Understanding the printer menus 118
Supplies menu
Use To
Replace Supply
All
1
All Photoconductors
2
Cyan Photoconductor
Magenta Photoconductor
Yellow Photoconductor
Black Photoconductor
Reset the supply counter for the replacement
photoconductor or for all photoconductors.
• Select Yes to reset the supply counter.
• Select No to exit.
Note: Reset the supply counter manually after replacing a
photoconductor.
Cyan Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Show the status of the cyan toner cartridge.
Magenta Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Show the status of the magenta toner cartridge.
Yellow Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Show the status of the yellow toner cartridge.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 119
Use To
Black Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Show the status of the black toner cartridge.
Cyan Photoconductor
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Show the status of the cyan photoconductor.
Magenta Photoconductor
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Show the status of the magenta photoconductor.
Yellow Photoconductor
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Show the status of the yellow photoconductor.
Black Photoconductor
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Show the status of the black photoconductor.
Waste Toner Bottle
Near Full
Replace
Missing
OK
Show the status of the waste toner bottle.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 120
Use To
Fuser
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Show the status of the fuser.
Transfer Module
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Show the status of the transfer module.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Universal
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• The factory default setting depends on the value of Paper Sizes in the
General Settings menu.
• For trays with automatic paper size sensing, only the size detected by
the tray appears.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 121
Use To
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking.
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 122
Use To
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 123
Use To
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Roug/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper being manually loaded.
Note: Plain paper is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the size of the envelope being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of envelope being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Configure MP menu
Use To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Understanding the printer menus 124
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.
Glossy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the heavy glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 125
Use To
Vinyl Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only if custom type is supported.
Understanding the printer menus 126
Paper Weight menu
Use To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Glossy Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the heavy glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 127
Use To
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded.
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Card Stock as the paper type.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the
Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided print jobs.
Understanding the printer menus 128
Use To
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.
Glossy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Glossy as the paper type.
Heavy Glossy Loading
Off
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy Glossy as the paper type.
Labels Loading
Off
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Labels as the paper type.
Vinyl Labels Loading
Off
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Vinyl Labels as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.
Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Rough or Cotton as the paper type.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the
Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided print jobs.
Understanding the printer menus 129
Use To
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom paper type
is supported.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the
Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided print jobs.
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a user‑defined custom name
created in the Embedded Web Server or in MarkVision
TM
Professional.
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus.
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom Type [x]
name in the printer menus.
Note: This menu item appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 130
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Specify the unit of measure.
Note: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the
international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–48 inches
76–1219 mm
Set the width for a portrait page orientation.
Notes:
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting.
• If the specified width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses
the maximum width allowed.
• The width can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–48 inches
76–1219 mm
Set the height for a portrait page orientation.
Notes:
• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting.
• If the specified height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses
the maximum height allowed.
• The height can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction.
Notes:
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the paper or specialty media can be
loaded in either direction.
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other
information.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details
about printed pages.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected
to print servers.
Understanding the printer menus 131
Use To
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address information.
Notes:
• This menu item is available when more than one network option is
installed.
• This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected
to print servers.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Note: This menu item appears only when LDSS is enabled.
Print Fonts
PCL Fonts
PostScript Fonts
Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.
Note: A separate list is available for PCL and PostScript emulations.
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer
hard disk.
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed
correctly and working properly.
• This menu item appears only when a flash and/or disk option is installed.
Asset Report Print a report containing printer asset information, such as serial number and
model name.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menus
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Understanding the printer menus 132
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 133
Use To
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Display and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Networks/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports menu > Networks/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports menu > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the network card.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active network card.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Understanding the printer menus 134
Use To
Job Timeout
0, 10–255 seconds
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup >TCP/IP
Use To
Activate
On
Off
Activate or deactivate TCP/IP.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Auto IP
Yes
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 135
Use To
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, you can
monitor and manage the printer remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current DDNS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >IPv6
• Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 136
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wireless network.
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >Wireless
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access
point (wireless router) within a given period of time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network by
using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings
of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless
connection directly between the printer and a computer.
• Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access
point.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate
Yes
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 137
Use To
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 138
Use To
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 139
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the parallel input buffer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 140
Use To
Advanced Status
On
Off
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
Off
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
Off
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 141
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
• When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the serial input buffer.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 142
Use To
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
• DTR is the factory default setting.
• DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
On
Off
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Notes:
• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
7
8
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 143
Use To
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Honor DSR
On
Off
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
*
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 144
Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
User‑Initiated E‑mail.
• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail
*
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
*
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Security menu
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use To
Login Restriction
Login failures
1–10
Failure time frame
1–60
Lockout time
1–60
Panel Login Timeout
1–900
Remote Login Timeout
1–120
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. 3 is the factory default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame in minutes when failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. 5 is the factory default
setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how many minutes users are locked out after
exceeding the login failures limit. 5 is the factory default setting.
• Panel Login Timeout specifies how many minutes the printer remains idle on
the home screen before automatically logging the user off. 30 seconds is the
factory default setting.
• Remote Login Timeout specifies how many minutes a remote interface (for
example, a Web page) can remain idle before automatically logging the user
off. 10 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 145
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
• This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• Once the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted.
Notes:
• If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print
jobs does not change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file
system. All permanent data on the hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 146
Use To
Wiping Mode
Off
Auto
Manual
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass
Specify a method for automatic disk wiping.
Notes:
• Single pass is the factory default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass
method.
Manual Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass
Specify a method for manual disk wiping.
Note: Single pass is the factory default setting.
Scheduled Method
Single pass
Multi‑pass
Specify a method for a scheduled disk wiping.
Note: Single pass is the factory default setting.
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Enable an authorized user to export the audit log.
Notes:
• To export the audit log from the printer control panel, attach a flash drive into
the printer.
• From the Embedded Web Server, download the audit log into a computer.
Delete Log
Yes
No
Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7
Specify whether and how audit logs are created.
Notes:
• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. Yes is the factory default setting.
• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.
• Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
• Severity of events to log records the severity value of each event. 4 is the
factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 147
Set Date and Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time Show the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time
[input date/time]
Enter the date and time.
Notes:
• For touch‑screen printer models, date and time are set in YYYY-MM-DD
HH:MM format.
• Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.
• For non‑touch‑screen printer models, a wizard allows you to set the date and
time in YYYY‑MM‑DD‑HH:MM.
Time Zone
[list of time zones]
Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically observe DST
On
Off
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• The setting is turned off if you manually set the date and time.
Understanding the printer menus 148
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portugues
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text appearing on the display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all models. You may
need to install a special hardware for some languages.
Eco‑Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
• For touch‑screen printer models, touch Eco‑Mode, and
then select from the options.
• Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to
its factory default settings.
• Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power, paper, and
specialty media.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 149
Use To
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Minimize the printer noise.
Notes:
• For touch‑screen printer models, touch Quiet Mode, and
then select from the options.
• Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports the
performance specifications of your printer and allows for
optimal printing of color‑rich documents.
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Run the setup wizard.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Keyboard
2
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key 1
Specify a language and custom key information for the display
keyboard.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 150
Use To
Paper Sizes
U.S.
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Notes:
• U.S. is the factory default setting.
• The initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
Displayed Information
2
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
[x] Toner
Fuser
Transfer Module
Specify what is displayed on the upper corners of the home
screen.
For Left side and Right side, select from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
For the [x] Toner, [x] Fuser, and Transfer Module menus, select
from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
• Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to
Display.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 151
Use To
Displayed Information
2
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the displayed information for supplies.
Select from the following options:
Display
No
Yes
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to
Display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
2
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
2
Eco‑Settings
2
Showroom
2
Change Background
2
Change the icons that appear on the home screen.
For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do Not Display
Date Format
2
[MM‑DD‑YYYY]
[DD‑MM‑YYYY]
[YYYY‑MM‑DD]
Format the date.
Note: [MM‑DD‑YYYY] is the U.S. factory default setting.
[DD‑MM‑YYYY] is the international factory default setting.
Time Format
2
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format for the time.
Note: 12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.
Screen Brightness
2
20–100
Specify the brightness of the display.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 152
Use To
Audio Feedback
2
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10
Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Show Bookmarks
2
Yes
No
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs
area.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Web Page Refresh Rate
2
30–300
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name
2
Specify a contact name.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Location
2
Specify the location.
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
• For touch‑screen printer models, touch Cartridge Alarm,
and then select from the options.
• Single is the factory default setting. This sounds several
quick beeps.
• Continuous repeats several quick beeps in a regular
interval.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
2
Disabled
1–240
Set the amount of time in minutes before the printer enters a
lower power state.
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 153
Use To
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–180
Set the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed
before it goes into a reduced power state.
Notes:
• 20 minutes is the factory default setting.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting.
• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
• Disabled appears only if Energy Conserve is set to Off.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1–3 hours
6 hours
1–3 days
1–2 weeks
1 month
Set the amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the display to a Ready state.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the rest of the job.
Notes:
• 90 is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in
the printer is printed.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job.
Notes:
• 40 is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 154
Use To
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for user
intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable
resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
• 30 is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is
installed.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Automatically continue printing from certain offline situations
when not resolved within the specified time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
Successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
• On sets the printer to print the entire page.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Use the printer factory default settings.
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. This keeps the
user‑defined settings.
• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads
stored in flash memory or in a hard disk are not affected.
1
This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
2
This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 155
Flash Drive menu
Note: This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Use To
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Color
Color
Black Only
Generate color outputs.
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the paper.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to paper orientation.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long Edge assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 156
Use To
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. No separator sheets are included in the print
job.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page
2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages in a
document for notes.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Notes:
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for
Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PS Emulation
PCL Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
• PS Emulation is the factory default printer language. PS
emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs.
• PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print
jobs.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Understanding the printer menus 157
Use To
Job Waiting
On
Off
Specify if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. These print
jobs are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print
normally. When the missing information or options are obtained,
the stored jobs print.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a non-read‑only printer
hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored
jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
• Whole Page allows images to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary. This
setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.
This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL
or PostScript interpreter.
Printer Usage
Max Yield
Max Speed
Set the printer for a faster print speed or a higher toner yield.
Note: Max Yield is the factory default setting.
Black Only Mode
On
Off
Set the printer to print text and graphics using only the black toner
cartridge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting. Downloads stored in RAM
are temporary.
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.
• This menu item appears only when a flash or printer hard
disk is installed.
• The menu setting reverts to its factory default value after
each power‑on reset (POR).
Understanding the printer menus 158
Use To
Resource Save
On
Off
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
print job that requires more memory than is available.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.
• On sets the printer to retain downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of
memory, 38 Memory Full appears, but downloads are
not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All Order is selected.
Notes:
• Alphabetical is the factory default setting.
• Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer
control panel.
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• When two-sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both
sides, the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation.
• When two-sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both
sides, the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation.
• You can set two‑sided printing in the software program. For Windows users,
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
print dialog and pop‑up menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to paper orientation.
Notes:
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long Edge assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 159
Use To
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On stacks the print job in sequence.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page
2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that prints per side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Understanding the printer menus 160
Use To
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Use To
Print Mode
Color
Black Only
Specify whether images are printed in black and white or in color.
Notes:
• Color is the factory default setting.
• The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting.
Color Correction
Auto
Off
Manual
Adjust the color output on the printed page.
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion tables
to each object on the printed page.
• Off turns off color correction.
• Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available in
the Manual Color menu.
• Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that
appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.
Print Resolution
1200 dpi
4800 CQ
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch or color quality (CQ).
Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–5
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Notes:
• 4 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
• If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner density and
darkness to all print jobs.
• If Print Mode is set to Color, then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• To set Enhance Fine Lines from the software program, with a document open,
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
• To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the printer IP
address in a Web browser.
Understanding the printer menus 161
Use To
Color Saver
On
Off
Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used
for text is not reduced.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On overrides Toner Darkness settings.
RGB Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust brightness in color outputs.
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
RGB Contrast
0–5
Adjust contrast in color outputs.
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
RGB Saturation
0–5
Adjust saturation in color outputs.
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
Color Balance
Cyan
‑5 to 5
Magenta
‑5 to 5
Yellow
‑5 to 5
Black
‑5 to 5
Reset Defaults
Adjust color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner used for
each color.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Samples
sRGB Display
sRGB Vivid
Display—True Black
Vivid
Off—RGB
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off—CMYK
Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the
printer.
Notes:
• Selecting any setting prints the sample.
• Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK
combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help
decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output.
• From a browser window, type the IP address of the printer to access a complete
list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 162
Use To
Manual Color
RGB Image
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
RGB Text
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
RGB Graphics
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
Customize the RGB color conversions.
Notes:
• sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color
conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer
monitor.
• sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. sRGB
Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business
graphics and text.
• Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated
colors.
• Display True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for
neutral gray colors.
• Off turns off color conversion.
Manual Color
CMYK Image
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
CMYK Text
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
CMYK Graphics
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
Customize the CMYK color conversions.
Notes:
• US CMYK is the US factory default setting. US CMYK applies a color conversion
table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output.
• Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. Euro CMYK applies a color
conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color
output.
• Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table.
• Off turns off color conversion.
Spot Color Replacement Provide the capability to assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors.
Color Adjust Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and to allow the printer to make
adjustments for color variations in output.
Notes:
• Calibrating starts when the menu is selected. Calibrating appears on the
display until the process is finished.
• Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as
room temperature and humidity. Color adjustments are made on printer
algorithms. Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process.
Understanding the printer menus 163
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the
printer hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Use To
Job Accounting Log
Off
On
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Monthly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Level
Off
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
Understanding the printer menus 164
Use To
E‑mail Address to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Notes:
• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 165
Use To
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
Off
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off
Enable users to disable the SysStart file.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, non‑defective flash
memory option card or printer hard disk is installed.
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Understanding the printer menus 166
Use To
Image Smoothing
On
Off
Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and smoothen
their color transitions.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in
resolution.
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of
fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make sure
the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write‑, or
password‑protected.
• Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 of an inch. This can be increased or decreased
in 0.25‑point increments.
Understanding the printer menus 167
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100.00
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi). This
can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
• For non‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page.
Notes:
• Portrait is the factory default setting. It prints text and graphics parallel to
the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the paper size
and orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 168
Use To
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Envelope
Off
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection appears
only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Return all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Understanding the printer menus 169
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 170
Use To
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
Off
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.
Invert
On
Off
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Color Quality Provides information about solving color quality issues
Print Quality Provides information about solving print quality issues
Printing Guide Provides information about loading paper and other specialty media
Media Guide Provides a list of the paper sizes supported in trays and feeders
Understanding the printer menus 171
Menu item Description
Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality defects,
and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality
Menu Map Provides a list of the control panel menus and settings
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Connection Guide Provides information about connecting the printer locally (USB) or to a network
Moving Guide Provides instructions for safely moving the printer
Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 172
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see
“Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 113.
Saving money and the environment 173
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports two‑sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of
the paper.
Notes:
• Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
• For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
setting multiple page printing (N‑Up) for the print job.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
• Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 188.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Saving money and the environment 174
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Saving money and the environment 175
Maintaining the printer
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to maintain optimum printer performance, or to replace parts and supplies,
may cause damage to your printer.
Ordering parts and supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you
purchased the printer.
Ordering a toner cartridge
When a message on the printer display indicates which toner cartridge needs to be replaced, order a new toner cartridge
immediately.
For information on replacing a toner cartridge, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard (with about 5% coverage per color). Extremely low
print coverage (less than 1.25%) for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield for that color and may
cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
Part name Lexmark Return Program Cartridge Regular cartridge
Cyan Toner Cartridge
Cyan High Yield Toner Cartridge
*
C746A1CG
C748H1CG
C746A2CG
C748H2CG
Magenta Toner Cartridge
Magenta High Yield Toner Cartridge
*
C746A1MG
C748H1MG
C746A2MG
C748H2MG
Yellow Toner Cartridge
Yellow High Yield Toner Cartridge
*
C746A1YG
C748H1YG
C746A2YG
C748H2YG
Black High Yield Toner Cartridge C746H1KG C746H2KG
*
These toner cartridges are supported only in C748x printer models.
Ordering a photoconductor
A message will appear on the printer display when a photoconductor needs to be replaced.
For information on replacing a photoconductor, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name Part number
Photoconductor C734X20G
Photoconductor, Multi‑Pack C734X24G
Notes:
• All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
• Reset the maintenance counter back to zero after installing the four new photoconductors.
Maintaining the printer 176
Ordering a fuser or a transfer module
A message on the printer display appears when the fuser or transfer module needs to be replaced.
For information on replacing the fuser or transfer module, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name Part number
Fuser 40X8112 (100 V)
40X8110 (115 V)
40X8111 (230 V)
Transfer module 40X8307
Ordering a waste toner bottle
A message on the printer display appears when the waste toner bottle needs to be replaced.
For information on replacing the waste toner bottle, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended.
Part name Part number
Waste toner bottle C734X77G
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Lexmark printers, parts, and supplies are designed to perform together for superior print quality. We recommend that
you use only genuine Lexmark parts and supplies to help extend the life of your product.
Lexmark's warranty does not cover damage caused by non-Lexmark parts and supplies.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
• High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
• Corrosive gases
• Heavy dust
Maintaining the printer 177
Replacing parts and supplies
Replacing a toner cartridge
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for
more than 10 minutes.
2 Pull the green tabs up and out of the specified cartridge to remove it from the printer.
3 Unpack the replacement toner cartridge, and then shake it front‑to‑back and side‑to‑side to redistribute the toner.
4 Remove the red packing strip from the new cartridge.
Maintaining the printer 178
5 Insert the new cartridge into the printer.
Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
6 Close the front door.
Note: When print becomes faded, immediately order a new cartridge. A message on the printer display specifies
what color cartridge is low in toner. You can try to extend the life of the cartridges by pulling them out of the
printer and shaking them to redistribute the toner.
Replacing the waste toner bottle
1 Locate the waste toner bottle release button on the left side of the printer.
2 Press the release button to the left, and then pull the waste toner bottle out to remove it from the printer.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 179
3 Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.
2
1
4 Peel the seal from the side of the full waste toner bottle, and then place it over the hole to seal off the waste toner
bottle.
1 2
5 Place the sealed waste toner bottle in the recycling bag.
6 Place the bag into the shipping box used for the replacement part.
1
2
7 Peel the recycling label off and place it on the shipping box.
1 2
Maintaining the printer 180
8 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer.
1
2
Replacing a photoconductor
Notes:
• Replace all four photoconductors at the same time for optimum print quality.
• Print quality is affected when the photoconductor is replaced without resetting the supply counter.
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the door open for more
than 10 minutes.
Maintaining the printer 181
2 Pull the specified photoconductor up, and then slide it to the right to remove it from the printer.
1
2
3 Unpack the replacement photoconductor.
1 2 3
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny area on the photoconductor drum. Touching it could
damage the photoconductor.
4 Align and insert the left end of the photoconductor, and then press the right end into place.
1
2
Maintaining the printer 182
5 Remove the red packing strip from the top of the photoconductor.
6 Close the front door.
Resetting the maintenance counter
Reset the maintenance counter after installing a new photoconductor.
When a “replace” or “low” message appears
Follow this procedure when a photoconductor is replaced and 84 Replace [color] photoconductor, 84
[Color] photoconductor nearly low, or 84 [Color] photoconductor low appears:
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Status/Supplies > > Supply Replaced >
or
> Status/Supplies > Supply Replaced
2 When Replaced [color] photoconductor appears, select Yes. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
Notes:
• Make sure to replace all four photoconductors at the same time.
• When Ready appears, the counter is reset.
Maintaining the printer 183
When a “replace” or “low” message does not appear
Follow this procedure when a photoconductor is replaced and a “replace” or “low” message does not appear:
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Supplies Menu > > Replace Supply >
or
> Supplies Menu > Replace Supply
2 Select the button that indicates the supply item you replaced.
• All
• Cyan Photoconductor
• Magenta Photoconductor
• Yellow Photoconductor
• Black Photoconductor
3 When [Color] photoconductor replaced appears, select Yes. For non‑touch screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
4 Press to return to the home screen.
Cleaning printer parts
Cleaning the interior of the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the interior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around and from inside the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Use a dry cloth to wipe away loose toner particles.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor unit or imaging unit, do not the leave the
door open for more than 10 minutes.
Maintaining the printer 184
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove all paper from the printer.
3 Dampen a clean, lint‑free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before beginning a new print job.
Cleaning the printhead lenses
Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems.
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
2 Remove all four toner cartridges. Do not remove the photoconductor units for this procedure.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny area on the photoconductor drum. Doing so can damage
the photoconductor.
Maintaining the printer 185
3 Locate the four printhead lenses.
4 Clean the lenses using compressed air.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printhead lenses. Doing so may cause damage.
5 Reinstall the four toner cartridges.
6 Close the front door.
Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
Maintaining the printer 186
• Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer 187
Clearing jams
Carefully select paper and specialty media and load them properly to avoid paper jams. If jams occur, then follow the
steps outlined in this chapter.
Note: Jam Recovery is set to Auto by default. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold
the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct paper loading Incorrect paper loading
• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex and straighten paper before loading it.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
Clearing jams 188
• Make sure all paper sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
• Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the printer display. Open doors and covers, and
remove trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed papers from all
possible locations.
Area name Jam numbers What to do
Inside the printer 200–201 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from behind the toner cartridge area.
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from under the photoconductor units.
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from under the fuser.
Inside the printer 202–203 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from the fuser area.
Open the top access cover, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Inside the printer 230 Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper located between the front door and Tray 1.
Standard output bin 202–203 Remove all paper from the standard output bin, and
then remove the jammed paper.
Tray [x] 24x Open each tray, and then remove any jams.
Multipurpose feeder 250 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and
then remove the jammed paper.
Clearing jams 189
200–201 paper jams
Paper jam in the toner cartridge area
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it up and out to remove it from behind the toner
cartridge area.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the front door.
4 Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .
Clearing jams 190
Paper jam under the photoconductor units
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 If lodged under the photoconductor units, then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull
it out .
3 If the jammed paper is lodged too tightly under the photoconductor units, then remove the photoconductor units
and place them on a flat surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2
1
4 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, then gently pull it out, and then reinstall each photoconductor unit.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
5 Close the front door.
6 Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .
Clearing jams 191
Paper jam in the fuser area
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Open the printer top access cover.
3 Determine where the jammed paper is located, and then remove it:
a If the paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
b If the paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly, then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each
side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
c If paper is not visible, then remove the fuser unit:
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the roller at the center of the fuser unit. Doing so may damage
the fuser.
1 Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them.
Clearing jams 192
2 Using the handholds on each side, lift and pull the fuser out of the printer.
d Place the fuser on a flat surface with the blue thumb screws facing you.
e Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide.
1
2
f Press the green arrow tab to the left, and then lift the top paper guide.
2
1
g Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 193
h Close the top paper guide. Make sure both sides of the paper guide are firmly seated.
i Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide.
1
2
j Reinstall the fuser unit:
1 Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side, and then insert it back into the printer.
2 Turn the screws clockwise to fasten the fuser securely.
Clearing jams 194
4 Close the printer top access cover, and then close the front door.
5 Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .
202–203 paper jams
If the jammed paper is visible in the standard exit bin, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Paper jam in the fuser area
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front doors open
for more than 10 minutes.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Open the printer top access cover.
3 Determine where the jammed paper is located, and then remove it:
a If the jammed paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
b If the jammed paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly, then firmly grasp the paper on each
side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 195
c If the jammed paper is not visible, then remove the fuser unit:
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the roller at the center of the fuser unit. Doing so may damage
the fuser.
1 Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them.
2 Using the handholds on each side, lift and pull the fuser out of the printer.
d Place the fuser on a flat surface with the blue thumb screws facing you.
Clearing jams 196
e Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide.
1
2
f Press the green arrow tab to the left, and then lift the top paper guide.
2
1
g Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
h Close the top paper guide. Make sure both sides of the paper guide are firmly seated.
Clearing jams 197
i Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide.
1
2
j Reinstall the fuser unit:
1 Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side, and then insert it back into the printer.
2 Turn the screws clockwise to fasten the fuser securely.
4 Close the printer top access cover, and then close the front door.
5 Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .
Paper jam inside the top access cover
1 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front doors open
for more than 10 minutes.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Open the printer top access cover.
3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the printer top access cover, and then close the front door.
5 Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .
Clearing jams 198
24x paper jam
Paper jam in Tray 1
1 Open Tray 1.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close Tray 1.
4 Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .
Clearing jams 199
Paper jam in one of the optional trays
1 Open the specified tray.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the tray.
4 Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .
250 paper jam
1 Press the paper release lever, and then remove any jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder.
1
2
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
2 Load new paper into the multipurpose feeder.
3 Depending on your printer model, touch Continue, jam cleared or press .
Clearing jams 200
Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
• Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
• The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
• All options are properly installed.
• The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Understanding the printer messages
An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive.
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove and reinsert the flash drive.
• If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacement.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 201
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 202
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Cancel the print job.
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted to recover data on a corrupted hard disk. The hard disk must be reformatted.
Select Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk problem
The printer hard disk must be reformatted.
Select Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Troubleshooting 203
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported flash drive is inserted. Remove the flash drive, and then install a supported one.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the specified tray into the printer.
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• To use the paper tray with the correct paper size or type, select Paper loaded, continue on the printer control panel.
For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• To use the paper tray with the correct paper size or type, select Paper loaded, continue on the printer control panel.
For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 204
Load [paper source] with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct paper size.
• To use the paper tray or feeder with the correct paper size, select Paper loaded, continue on the printer control
panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a
tray with the correct paper size, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the specified tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• To use the paper tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type, select Paper loaded, continue on the printer
control panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the current job.
Load manual feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or
is selected, then the printer manually overrides
the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.
• Cancel the current job.
Load manual feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or
is selected, then the printer automatically
overrides the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.
• Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 205
Load manual feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct paper size.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or
is selected, then the printer manually overrides
the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.
• Cancel the current job.
Load manual feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or
is selected, then the printer manually overrides
the request, and then prints from an automatically selected tray.
• Cancel the current job.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Use current supplies to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
1 Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
Remove paper from standard output bin
1 Remove paper stack from the standard output bin.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
Troubleshooting 206
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Restore on the printer control panel to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Select Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Some held jobs were not restored
Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Supply needed to complete job
A supply needed to complete the job is missing. Cancel the current job.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.
Unsupported disk
1 Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch screen printer models, press to
confirm.
31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge
The specified toner cartridge is either missing or not functioning properly.
• Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then reinstall it.
• Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then install a new one.
32.xx [Color] cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the specified toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.
Troubleshooting 207
34 Incorrect paper size, open [paper source]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the correct paper size in the tray.
• Select Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press
to confirm.
• Check tray length and width guides and make sure paper is properly loaded in the tray.
• For Windows users, check the Print Properties settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper
size and type.
For Macintosh users, check the Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size
and type.
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the
paper is large enough for the data being printed.
• Cancel the current print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the
menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
• Install additional memory.
36 Printer service required
Select Continue to clear the message or contact customer support. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.
Troubleshooting 208
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer is unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs in the printer hard disk.
Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Cancel job to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
• Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
• Cancel the current print job.
Troubleshooting 209
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
53 Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press
to confirm.
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and may need to
be replaced.
54 Network [x] software error
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
• Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer. For more information, contact customer support.
54 Serial option [x] error
Try one or more of the following:
• Check that the serial cable is connected properly and is the correct one for the serial port.
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and on the computer.
• Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
• Turn the printer power off, and then turn it back on.
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
• Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, contact customer support.
Troubleshooting 210
55 Unsupported option in slot [x]
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
56 Parallel port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
56 USB port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
Troubleshooting 211
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored
Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.
• The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.
Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
58 Input config error
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check if all tray configurations are correct. Remove unnecessary trays if needed.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many disks installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many flash options installed
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
• Remove extra flash options:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Troubleshooting 212
58 Too many trays attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked. Remove stacked trays one at a time from the top down.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
59 Incompatible tray [x]
Only options designed specifically for this printer are supported.
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the specified tray.
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press
to confirm.
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the defective printer hard disk.
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue processing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
80.xx Fuser near life warning
1 Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the
instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
Troubleshooting 213
80.xx Fuser life warning
• Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the
instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printers, press to confirm.
80.xx Replace fuser
1 Replace the fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
80.xx Fuser missing
Reinsert the fuser into the printer.
For instructions on installing the fuser, select More Information on the printer control panel.
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full
Make sure a replacement waste toner bottle has been ordered.
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, select More Information on the printer control panel.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, select More Information on the printer control panel.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
82.xx Waste toner bottle missing
1 Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer.
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, select More Information on the printer control panel.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to
confirm.
Troubleshooting 214
83.xx Transfer module life warning
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
• Order a replacement transfer module immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new transfer module,
following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
83.xx Transfer module missing
Reinsert the transfer module into the printer.
For instructions on installing the transfer module, select More Information on the printer control panel.
83.xx Replace transfer module
1 Replace the transfer module
For instructions on installing the transfer module, select More Information on the printer control panel.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
83.xx Transfer module near life warning
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
• Order a replacement transfer module immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new transfer module,
following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
84.xx [Color] photoconductor nearly low
1 Order a replacement photoconductor.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement supply.
Notes:
• All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
• Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.
3 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
84.xx [Color] photoconductor low
1 Order a replacement photoconductor immediately.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement supply.
Troubleshooting 215
Notes:
• All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
• Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.
3 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
84.xx Replace [color] photoconductor
1 Replace the photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement supply.
Notes:
• All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
• Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
84.xx [Color] photoconductor missing
Install the specified color photoconductor.
For instructions on installing the photoconductor, select More Information on the printer control panel.
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low
Order a replacement for the specified toner cartridge.
88.xx [color] cartridge low
1 Remove the specified cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Notes:
• Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded. When the print remains faded, replace the
cartridge.
• Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily.
Troubleshooting 216
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low
The specified toner cartridge is critically low.
1 For instructions on replacing a toner cartridge, select More Information on the printer control panel.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
88.xx [Color] cartridge very low
The specified print or toner cartridge is very low.
1 For instructions on replacing a cartridge, select More Information on the printer control panel.
2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to
confirm.
Solving printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then print it again.
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting
all jobs except the first one.
• For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents"
check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.
• For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the
printer.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the flash drive is supported.
Troubleshooting 217
Incorrect characters print
• Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace
mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
• Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
C
HECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper size settings.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the job.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.
Troubleshooting 218
Print jobs do not print
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER
From the printer control panel, check the status. If necessary, follow the recovery instructions.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job.
CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT
Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply.
CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.
CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
• If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported
operating system and using a compatible printer software.
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected,
then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support
person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Troubleshooting 219
Print job takes longer than expected
Try one or more of the following:
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print
job.
TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING
1 Depending on your printer model, press or touch .
2 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off
3 Press or touch .
CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS
When using Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.
Printing slows down
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE TO USE PAPER NOT NARROW ENOUGH TO INVOKE THE SLOWDOWN MODE
Place larger paper such as Letter and A4 in the tray, and then print the same file.
Note: The slowdown mode functions as designed. This is to protect the fuser from becoming damaged by large
temperature differentials across its length.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Printer display is blank
The printer self‑test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
If Performing Self Test and Ready do not appear, then turn the printer off, and then contact customer support.
Troubleshooting 220
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You
must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Unexpected page breaks
I
NCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1 Depending on your printer model, press or touch .
2 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Print Timeout
3 Increase the Print Timeout value, and then press or touch to confirm.
Solving home screen application problems
Note: This troubleshooting step applies only to touch-screen printer models.
An application error has occurred
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings or Configuration.
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > System tab > Log.
4 From the Filter menu, select an application status.
5 From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.
Troubleshooting 221
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.
Solving option problems
2,000-sheet drawer problems
C
HECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION
Make sure the 2,000‑sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer.
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
CLEAR ANY JAMS
Open the tray or feeder, and then remove any jammed paper.
AVOID PAPER JAMS
• Flex the paper.
• Make sure the drawer is properly installed.
• Make sure paper is loaded correctly.
• Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum fill line indicated in the tray.
• Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged.
• Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded.
Cannot detect flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Cannot detect printer hard disk
Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS
• Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board.
• Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
Troubleshooting 222
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For more information on installing the network printing software, do the following:
1 Open the Software and Documentation CD.
2 Click Additional.
3 Under Publications on this CD, select Networking Guide.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT (ISP) CONNECTIONS
Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions (ISP) port.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
Try one or more of the following:
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1 Turn the printer off using the power switch.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or
go to
www.lexmark.com to view the option instruction sheet.
Troubleshooting 223
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option.
For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 27.
Paper tray problems
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not
be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that
came with the paper tray, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
CHECK THE USB/PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION
Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.
Troubleshooting 224
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located in the tray or feeder.
MAKE SURE THE ENTIRE PAPER STACK IS SITTING FLAT IN THE TRAY
Before loading the paper, do the following:
• Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
• Straighten the edges on a level surface.
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
1 Clear any jammed paper from all specified locations.
2 From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Jammed pages are not reprinted
T
URN ON JAM RECOVERY
1 Depending on your printer model, press or touch .
2 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
3 Select the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
4 Press or touch to confirm.
Troubleshooting 225
Solving print quality problems
If the solutions here do not correct the problem, contact customer support. You may have a printer part that requires
adjustment or replacement.
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the
software program.
Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Gray background on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
Troubleshooting 226
CHECK THE BACKGROUND DARKNESS OR REMOVAL SETTING
• Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.
• Increase the background removal setting.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective cartridge.
Incorrect margins
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
Troubleshooting 227
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective cartridge.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer module.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Paper curl
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Print irregularities
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Troubleshooting 228
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer module.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective fuser.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Print is too dark
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
• From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select a lower value for these settings.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users:
1 Choose File > Print.
2 From the print options pop-up menu, choose Printer Features.
3 Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
Troubleshooting 229
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
• From the Paper menu on printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting.
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
Print is too light
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too light, the Brightness setting may be too light, or the Contrast setting may be
too low.
• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties
• For Macintosh users:
1 Choose File > Print.
2 From the print options pop-up menu, choose Printer Features.
3 Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
Troubleshooting 230
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.
Printer is printing blank pages
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
Troubleshooting 231
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.
Repeating defects appear on prints
)
)
)
Try one or more of the following:
REPLACE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the cartridge of the color with the repeating defect, if the defects occur in the following instances:
• Every 33 mm (1.30 in.) of the page
• Every 35.3 mm (1.39 in.) of the page
REPLACE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR
Replace the photoconductor of the color with the repeating defect, if the defects occur in the following instances:
• Every 28.3 mm (1.11 in.) of the page
• Every 72.4 mm (2.85 in.) of the page
REPLACE THE FUSER
Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances:
• Every 47.4 mm (1.87 in.) of the page
• Every 94.8 mm (3.73 in.) of the page
• Every 113 mm (4.45 in.) of the page
Shadow images appear on prints
Troubleshooting 232
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective photoconductor.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced.
Skewed print
C
HECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
Solid color or black pages appear on prints
Troubleshooting 233
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE AND IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor. If the problem continues, then the photoconductor may need to be
replaced.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY, ARE NOT DEFECTIVE, AND NOT
LOW
ON TONER
• Remove the cartridges, shake each cartridge from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall them.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
• Reinsert the cartridges.
Note: If the quality does not improve, then replace the cartridges.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
• From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Paper Menu > Default Source > select a tray or feeder > Submit
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty cartridge.
Troubleshooting 234
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
• From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Paper Menu > Default Source > select a tray or feeder > Submit
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective transfer module.
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY OR IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Reinstall or replace the defective print or toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective transfer module.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective photoconductor.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective fuser.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS BEEN RECALIBRATED RECENTLY
Select Color Adjust in the Quality menu.
Troubleshooting 235
MAKE SURE THE APPLICATION HAS NOT SPECIFIED AN OFF‑WHITE BACKGROUND
Check the application settings.
MAKE SURE NO TONER IS IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact customer support.
Toner rubs off
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings. Change the Paper
Weight setting from Normal to Heavy.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the
tray or feeder. If necessary, change the Paper Texture setting from Normal to Rough.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement
part.
Troubleshooting 236
Toner specks
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective cartridge.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Troubleshooting 237
Uneven print density
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective cartridge.
Solving color quality problems
FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue
needed to produce a certain color.
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers,
and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the
amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow
users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The
color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the
application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text
while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.
Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are
many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how
the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color‑matching problems, see the question, “How
can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?”
Troubleshooting 238
The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?
Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be
caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust
the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make
subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of
toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and
yellow could potentially improve the color balance.
My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain
the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector
must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print
on the recommended type of color transparencies.
What is manual color correction?
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color conversion tables to process
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user‑defined color conversion will be implemented.
Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how
the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).
Notes:
• Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating
system controls the adjustment of colors.
• The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred
colors for the majority of documents.
To manually apply a different color conversion table:
1 From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2 From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the
affected object type.
Object type Color conversion tables
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics
• Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied
to all incoming color formats.
• sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors
displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for
printing photographs.
• Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the
colors displayed on a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create
all levels of neutral gray.
• sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB
Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business
graphics.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.
Troubleshooting 239
Object type Color conversion tables
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
• US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP
(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.
• Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color
output.
• Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color
correction setting.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color
Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple‑page printout consisting
of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table
selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box
through the selected color conversion table.
By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color
combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For
more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the
selected color conversion table for the particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction
setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the
color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color
Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color conversion is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating
system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting
printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?
Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed
Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user‑defined RGB or
CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment
box.
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Configuration > Color Samples > Detailed Options.
3 Select a color conversion table.
4 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.
Troubleshooting 240
5 Enter an increment value from 1–255.
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.
6 Click Print.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER
• Depending on the network settings, you may need to type “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer
IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.
• Make sure printer IP address is correct.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For
more information, contact your system support person.
Contacting customer support
When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1‑800‑539‑6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 241
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark C746n, C746dn, C746dtn, C748e, C748de, C748dte
Machine type:
5026
Model(s):
310, 311, 330, 331, 510, 511, 530, 531, 538, 539
Edition notice
October 2014
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit
www.lexmark.com.
© 2014 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 242
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
MarkTrack and PrintCryption are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Taffy Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Notices 243
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M01-003; FCC ID: IYLM01003; IC: 2376A-M01003
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the documentation CD.
Notices 244
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 55
Ready 33
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of lead,
mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules.
Battery notice
This product contains Perchlorate material. Special handling may apply. For more information, go to
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.
Notices 245
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping and storage temperature -40 to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)
Mercury statement
This product contains mercury in the lamp (<5mg Hg). Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance:
www.eiae.org.
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Notices 246
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия
лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption
(Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs. 535
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original documents. N/A
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. N/A
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 48
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 6.8 (C746); 7.3 (C748)
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.55
Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned
off.
0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See
www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 247
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
• Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Model‑specific information
The following information applies only to 310, 330, 510, 530, and 539 printer models.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,
2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, the
ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and
electronic equipment.
Notices 248
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2009/125/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy‑related products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Notices 249
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Multiple model information
The following information applies only to 311, 331, 511, 531, and 538 printer models.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and
2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
Notices 250
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on the restrictions of
use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
Notices 251
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK
Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasī
bām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Notices 252
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Notices 253
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Notices 254
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
Notices 255
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.
Notices 256
Index
Numerics
2,000‑sheet drawer
installing 25
2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
loading 47, 88
200–201 paper jams 190
202–203 paper jams 195
24x paper jam 199
250 paper jam 200
31.xx Missing or defective [color]
cartridge 207
32.xx [Color] cartridge part number
unsupported by device 207
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] 208
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 208
36 Printer service required 208
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 208
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 209
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted 209
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 209
38 Memory full 209
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 209
51 Defective flash detected 209
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 210
53 Unformatted flash detected 210
54 Network [x] software error 210
54 Serial option [x] error 210
54 Standard network software
error 210
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 211
550‑sheet drawer
installing 25
550‑sheet specialty media drawer
installing 25
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional)
loading 39, 79
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 211
56 Serial port [x] disabled 211
56 Standard USB port disabled 211
56 USB port [x] disabled 211
57 Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored 212
58 Input config error 212
58 Too many disks installed 212
58 Too many flash options
installed 212
58 Too many trays attached 213
59 Incompatible tray [x] 213
61 Remove defective disk 213
62 Disk full 213
80.xx Fuser life warning 214
80.xx Fuser missing 214
80.xx Fuser near life warning 213
80.xx Replace fuser 214
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 214
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 214
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 214
83.xx Replace transfer module 215
83.xx Transfer module life
warning 215
83.xx Transfer module missing 215
83.xx Transfer module near life
warning 215
84.xx [Color] photoconductor
low 215
84.xx [color] photoconductor
missing 216
84.xx [Color] photoconductor
nearly low 215
84.xx Replace [color]
photoconductor 216
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically
low 217
88.xx [color] cartridge low 216
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 216
88.xx [Color] cartridge very low 217
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 75
accessing the system board 9
Active NIC menu 132
adding hardware options
print driver 27
adjusting printer display
brightness 173
adjusting Sleep mode 63, 104
adjusting toner darkness 55, 96
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 60, 101
AppleTalk menu 137
applications
home screen 76
attaching cables 26
attaching the system board cover 9
available internal options 9
avoiding jams 114
avoiding paper jams 188
B
Background and Idle Screen
using 76
black‑and‑white printing 55, 95
buttons, touch screen
using 73
C
cables
Ethernet 26
USB 26
calling customer support 241
canceling a print job
from a computer 60, 101
from the printer control
panel 60, 101
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 241
card stock
tips 111
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 202
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 202
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 201
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load [orientation] 202
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] 202
Index 257
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 202
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 203
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 203
checking an unresponsive
printer 201
checking status of parts and
supplies 61, 102
checking the status of parts and
supplies 61, 102
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 60, 101
cleaning
exterior of the printer 185
interior of the printer 184
cleaning the printhead lenses 185
Close front door 203
confidential data
information on securing 68, 108
confidential print jobs 58, 99
printing from a Macintosh
computer 58, 99
printing from Windows 58, 99
Confidential Print menu 146
configuration information
wireless network 28
Configure MP menu 124
configuring port settings 34
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 173
conserving supplies 174
Eco‑Mode 61, 103
Hibernate mode 63, 103
Quiet Mode 62, 104
Sleep Mode 104
Sleep mode 63
conserving supplies 174
contacting customer support 241
control panel, printer 37, 71
corrupted printer hard disk 203
creating custom name
paper type 93
Custom Names menu 130
custom paper type
assigning 53
custom paper type name
assigning 94
creating 53
Custom Type [x]
assigning a paper type 53
creating custom name 93
Custom Type [x] name
creating 53
Custom Types menu 130
D
Default Source menu 121
directory list
printing 59, 100
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk
space. 203
Disk problem 203
disk wiping 66, 107
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 220
display, control panel 37, 71
display, printer control panel
adjusting brightness 173
disposing of printer hard
disk 64, 105
documents, printing
from Macintosh 54, 95
from Windows 54, 95
E
Eco‑Mode setting 61, 103
Eco‑Settings
about 77
Embedded Web Server
accessing 75
adjusting brightness 173
administrator settings 60, 101
checking the status of
parts 61, 102
checking the status of
supplies 61, 102
networking settings 60, 101
problem accessing 241
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
where to find 108
Embedded Web Server — Security:
Administrator's Guide
where to find 60, 101
Embedded Web Server — Security:
Administrator’s Guide
where to find 68
emission
notices 244, 245, 248, 249, 250,
251
encrypting the printer hard
disk 67, 107
envelopes
loading 50, 90
tips on using 110
environmental settings
conserving supplies 174
Eco‑Mode 61, 103
Hibernate mode 63, 103
printer display brightness,
adjusting 173
Quiet Mode 62, 104
Sleep Mode 104
Sleep mode 63
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 146
erasing hard disk memory 66, 107
erasing non‑volatile
memory 65, 106
erasing volatile memory 65, 106
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB 204
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 28
Ethernet port 26
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 28
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 78
exterior of the printer
cleaning 185
F
factory defaults
restoring 104
factory defaults, restoring 64
FAQ about color printing 238
FCC notices 244, 249
finding more information about the
printer 7
Finishing menu 159
firmware card
installing 14
flash drive
printing from 56, 97
Flash Drive menu 156
Index 258
flash drives
supported file types 57, 98
flash memory card
installing 14
troubleshooting 222
font sample list
printing 59, 100
Forms and Favorites
setting up 76
four‑arrow‑button printer control
panel 37
fuser
ordering 177
G
General Settings menu 149
green settings
Eco‑Mode 61, 103
Hibernate mode 63, 103
Quiet Mode 62, 104
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 27
held jobs 58, 99
printing from a Macintosh
computer 58, 99
printing from Windows 58, 99
Help menu 171
Hibernate mode
using 63, 103
hiding icons on the home screen 75
home screen
buttons, understanding 72
hiding icons 75
showing icons 75
home screen applications
configuring 76
finding information 76
home screen buttons
understanding 72
HTML menu 170
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 75
showing 75
Image menu 171
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 78
indicator light 37, 71
Install Tray [x] 204
installing on a wireless network
using Windows 29
installing options
order of installation 24
installing printer 27
on wireless network 29
installing printer hard disk 19
installing printer on a wireless
network
using Macintosh 31
interior of the printer
cleaning 184
internal print server
troubleshooting 222
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 34
installing 15
troubleshooting 223
IPv6 menu 136
J
jams
avoiding 188
locating jam areas 189
locations 189
numbers 189
jams, avoiding
cutting paper and specialty
media 113
selecting paper and specialty
media 113
jams, clearing
200–201 paper jams 190
202–203 paper jams 195
24x paper jam 199
250 paper jam 200
Job Accounting menu 164
L
labels, paper
tips 110
letterhead
loading, 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder 47, 88
loading, multipurpose feeder 109
loading, trays 109
light, indicator 37, 71
linking trays 52, 93, 94
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 204
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] 204
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 205
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 205
Load manual feeder with [custom
string] 205
Load manual feeder with [custom
type name] 205
Load manual feeder with [paper
size] 206
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 206
loading
2,000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder 47, 88
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional) 79
envelopes 50, 90
letterhead in 2,000‑sheet
high‑capacity feeder 47, 88
multipurpose feeder 50, 90
optional 550‑sheet special media
tray 42, 82
optional 550‑sheet tray 39
standard 550‑sheet tray 39
transparencies 50, 90
loading letterhead
paper orientation 109
loading the optional special media
tray 42, 82
loading the optional tray 79
loading the standard tray 39, 79
lock, security 64, 105
locking the system board 64, 105
M
maintenance counter,
resetting 183
Max Speed and Max Yield
using 55, 96
memory
types installed on printer 64, 105
memory card
installing 12
troubleshooting 223
menu settings page
printing 60, 101
Index 259
menus
Active NIC 132
AppleTalk 137
Confidential Print 146
Configure MP 124
Custom Names 130
Custom Types 130
Default Source 121
diagram of 118
Erase Temporary Data Files 146
Finishing 159
Flash Drive 156
General Settings 149
Help 171
HTML 170
Image 171
IPv6 136
Job Accounting 164
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 145
Network [x] 132
Network Card 134
Paper Loading 128
Paper Size/Type 121
Paper Texture 125
Paper Weight 127
Parallel [x] 139
PCL Emul 167
PDF 166
PostScript 166
Quality 161
Reports 131, 134
Security Audit Log 147
Serial [x] 141
Set Date and Time 148
Setup 157
SMTP Setup menu 144
Standard Network 132
Standard USB 138
Substitute Size 125
Supplies 119
TCP/IP 135
Universal Setup 131
Utilities 165
Wireless 137
XPS 166
menus diagram 118
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 145
mobile device
printing from 57, 98
moving the printer 35, 69, 186, 187
multipurpose feeder
loading 50, 90
N
Network [x] menu 132
Network Card menu 134
network options 9
network settings
Embedded Web Server 60, 101
network setup page
printing 61, 102
Networking Guide
where to find 60, 101
noise emission levels 245
non‑volatile memory 64, 105
erasing 65, 106
notices 243, 244, 245, 246, 247,
248, 249, 250, 251, 252
O
optional 550‑sheet special media
tray
loading 42, 82
optional special media tray
loading 42, 82
optional tray
loading 79
options
2,000‑sheet drawer 25
550‑sheet drawer 25
550‑sheet specialty media
drawer 25
firmware card 14
firmware cards 9
flash memory card 14
Internal Solutions Port 15
list 9
memory card 12
memory cards 9
network 9
order of installation 24
ports 9
printer hard disk, installing 19
printer hard disk, removing 23
ordering
fuser 177
photoconductors 176
toner cartridges 176
transfer module 177
waste toner bottle 177
P
paper
characteristics 111
letterhead 113
preprinted forms 113
recommended print side 113
recycled 113
selecting 113
setting size 38
setting type 38
storing 114
unacceptable 112
Universal size setting 38, 78
using recycled 173
Paper changes needed 206
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after paper jam
is cleared 225
paper jams
avoiding 188
paper jams, clearing
200–201 paper jams 190
202–203 paper jams 195
24x paper jam 199
250 paper jam 200
Paper Loading menu 128
paper size
setting 78
Universal 131
Paper Size/Type menu 121
paper sizes
supported 115
Paper Texture menu 125
paper type
setting 78
paper types
supported by printer 117
where to load 117
Paper Weight menu 127
paper weights
supported by printer 117
Parallel [x] menu 139
parts
checking status 61, 102
checking, from printer control
panel 102
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 61, 102
using genuine Lexmark 177
Index 260
parts and supplies, status of
checking, on printer control
panel 61
PCL Emul menu 167
PDF menu 166
photoconductor
replacing 181
photoconductor maintenance
counter
resetting 183
photoconductors
ordering 176
port settings
configuring 34
PostScript menu 166
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 28
print driver
hardware options, adding 27
print job
canceling from the printer control
panel 60
canceling, from computer 60, 101
print quality
cleaning the printhead lenses 185
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 231
characters have jagged edges 226
clipped images 226
gray background on prints 226
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
on prints 227
poor transparency quality 237
print irregularities 228
print is too dark 229
print is too light 230
repeating defects 232
shadow images appear on
prints 232
skewed print 233
solid black pages 233
solid color pages 233
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 234
streaked vertical lines 235
toner fog or background shading
on the page 235
toner rubs off 236
toner specks 237
uneven print density 238
print quality, poor
avoiding by selecting paper and
specialty media 113
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 217
held jobs do not print 217
incorrect characters print 218
incorrect margins 227
jammed pages are not
reprinted 225
job prints from wrong tray 218
job prints on wrong paper 218
jobs do not print 219
Large jobs do not collate 218
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 218
paper curl 228
paper frequently jams 224
print job takes longer than
expected 220
printing slows down 220
tray linking does not work 221
unexpected page breaks 221
printer 27
configured models 36, 70
minimum clearances 35, 69
moving 35, 69, 186, 187
selecting a location 35, 69
shipping 187
printer configurations 36, 70
printer control panel
adjusting brightness 173
factory defaults, restoring 64, 104
using 37, 71
printer control panel, virtual
display
using the Embedded Web
Server 60, 101
printer hard disk
disposing of 64, 105
encrypting 67, 107
installing 19
removing 23
troubleshooting 222
wiping 66, 107
printer hard disk
encryption 67, 107
printer hard disk memory
erasing 66, 107
printer information
where to find 7
printer messages
31.xx Missing or defective [color]
cartridge 207
32.xx [Color] cartridge part
number unsupported by
device 207
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] 208
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 208
36 Printer service required 208
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 208
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 209
37 Insufficient memory, some
Held Jobs were deleted 209
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 209
38 Memory full 209
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 209
51 Defective flash detected 209
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 210
53 Unformatted flash
detected 210
54 Network [x] software error 210
54 Serial option [x] error 210
54 Standard network software
error 210
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 211
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 211
56 Serial port [x] disabled 211
56 Standard USB port
disabled 211
56 USB port [x] disabled 211
57 Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored 212
58 Input config error 212
58 Too many disks installed 212
58 Too many flash options
installed 212
58 Too many trays attached 213
59 Incompatible tray [x] 213
61 Remove defective disk 213
62 Disk full 213
80.xx Fuser life warning 214
80.xx Fuser missing 214
80.xx Fuser near life warning 213
Index 261
80.xx Replace fuser 214
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 214
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 214
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 214
83.xx Replace transfer
module 215
83.xx Transfer module life
warning 215
83.xx Transfer module
missing 215
83.xx Transfer module near life
warning 215
84.xx [Color] photoconductor
low 215
84.xx [color] photoconductor
missing 216
84.xx [Color] photoconductor
nearly low 215
84.xx Replace [color]
photoconductor 216
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically
low 217
88.xx [color] cartridge low 216
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 216
88.xx [Color] cartridge very
low 217
an error has occurred with the
USB drive 201
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 202
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] load [orientation] 202
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 201
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] load
[orientation] 202
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] 202
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 202
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 203
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 203
Close front door 203
Disk corrupted 203
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 203
Disk problem 203
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB 204
Insert Tray [x] 204
Install Tray [x] 204
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 204
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] 204
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 205
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 205
Load manual feeder with [custom
string] 205
Load manual feeder with [custom
type name] 205
Load manual feeder with [paper
size] 206
Load manual feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 206
Paper changes needed 206
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 206
Remove paper from standard
output bin 206
Restore held jobs? 207
Some held jobs were not
restored 207
Supply needed to complete
job 207
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 207
Unsupported disk 207
printer options troubleshooting
2,000‑sheet drawer problems 222
cannot detect flash memory
card 222
cannot detect printer hard
disk 222
internal print server 222
Internal Solutions Port 223
memory card 223
option does not work 223
paper tray problems 224
USB/parallel interface card 224
printer problems, solving basic 201
printer security
information on 68, 108
printer setup
verifying 34
printhead lenses
cleaning 185
printing
black‑and‑white 55, 95
canceling, from the printer control
panel 101
directory list 59, 100
font sample list 59, 100
forms 95
from a mobile device 57, 98
from flash drive 56, 97
from Macintosh 54, 95
from Windows 54, 95
Max Speed and Max Yield 55, 96
menu settings page 60, 101
network setup page 61, 102
printing a directory list 100
printing a document 54, 95
printing a font sample list 100
printing a menu settings page 101
printing a network setup
page 61, 102
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh
computer 58, 99
from Windows 58, 99
printing forms 95
printing from a flash drive 56, 97
printing from a mobile
device 57, 98
printing in black and white 55, 95
publications
where to find 7
Q
Quality menu 161
Quiet Mode 62, 104
R
reattaching the system board
cover 9
recommended print side 113
recycled paper
using 113, 173
recycling 246
Lexmark packaging 175
Lexmark products 174
toner cartridges 175
Index 262
reducing noise 62, 104
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 77
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 206
Remove paper from standard
output bin 206
removing printer hard disk 23
repeat print jobs 58, 99
printing from a Macintosh
computer 58, 99
printing from Windows 58, 99
replacing supplies
photoconductor 181
toner cartridge 178
waster toner bottle 179
Reports menu 131, 134
reserve print jobs 58
printing from a Macintosh
computer 58, 99
printing from Windows 58, 99
resetting the maintenance
counter 183
Restore held jobs? 207
restoring factory default
settings 104
S
safety information 5, 6
Security Audit Log menu 147
security lock 64, 105
security Web page
where to find 68, 108
selecting a location for the
printer 35, 69
Serial [x] menu 141
Set Date and Time menu 148
setting
paper size 38, 78
paper type 38, 78
TCP/IP address 135
setting the Universal paper
size 38, 78
Setup menu 157
shipping the printer 187
showing icons on the home
screen 75
Showroom
about 77
Sleep Mode
adjusting 104
Sleep mode
adjusting 63
SMTP Setup menu 144
Some held jobs were not
restored 207
specialty media
recommended print side 113
selecting 113
Standard Network menu 132
standard tray
loading 39, 79
Standard USB menu 138
statement of volatility 64, 105
status of parts
checking 102
status of parts and supplies
checking 61
status of supplies
checking 102
storing
paper 114
supplies 177
storing print jobs 58, 99
Substitute Size menu 125
supplies
checking status 61, 102
checking, from printer control
panel 102
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 61, 102
conserving 174
storing 177
using genuine Lexmark 177
using recycled paper 173
Supplies menu 119
supplies, ordering
fuser 177
photoconductors 176
toner cartridges 176
transfer module 177
waste toner bottle 177
supplies, replacing
photoconductor 181
waste toner bottle 179
Supply needed to complete job 207
supported file types 98
supported flash drives 57, 98
supported paper sizes 115
system board
accessing 9
locking 64, 105
system board cover
attaching 9
reattaching 9
T
TCP/IP menu 135
telecommunication notices 249
tips
card stock 111
labels, paper 110
on using envelopes 110
on using letterhead 109
on using transparencies 110
tips on using envelopes 110
tips on using letterhead 109
toner cartridge
replacing 178
toner cartridges
ordering 176
recycling 175
toner darkness
adjusting 55, 96
toner rubs off 236
touch screen
buttons, using 73
touch‑screen printer control
panel 71
transfer module
ordering 177
transparencies
loading 50, 90, 110
tips on using 110
using 110
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 207
trays
linking 52, 93, 94
unlinking 52, 93, 94
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 221
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 241
checking an unresponsive
printer 201
contacting customer support 241
FAQ about color printing 238
solving basic printer
problems 201
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 220
Index 263
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after paper jam
is cleared 225
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 217
held jobs do not print 217
incorrect characters print 218
incorrect margins 227
jammed pages are not
reprinted 225
job prints from wrong tray 218
job prints on wrong paper 218
jobs do not print 219
Large jobs do not collate 218
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 218
paper curl 228
paper frequently jams 224
print job takes longer than
expected 220
printing slows down 220
tray linking does not work 221
unexpected page breaks 221
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 231
characters have jagged edges 226
clipped images 226
gray background on prints 226
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
on prints 227
poor transparency quality 237
print irregularities 228
print is too dark 229
print is too light 230
repeating defects 232
shadow images appear on
prints 232
skewed print 233
solid black pages 233
solid color pages 233
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 234
streaked vertical lines 235
toner fog or background shading
on the page 235
toner rubs off 236
toner specks 237
uneven print density 238
troubleshooting, printer options
2,000‑sheet drawer problems 222
cannot detect flash memory
card 222
cannot detect printer hard
disk 222
internal print server 222
Internal Solutions Port 223
memory card 223
option does not work 223
paper tray problems 224
USB/parallel interface card 224
U
understanding the home screen 72
Universal Paper Size
setting 78
Universal paper size 131
setting 38
Universal Setup menu 131
unlinking trays 52, 93, 94
Unsupported disk 207
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 204
USB port 26
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 224
User’s Guide
using 7
using Forms and Favorites 95
using Hibernate mode 63, 103
using Max Speed and Max
Yield 55, 96
using recycled paper 173
using the four‑arrow‑button printer
control panel 37
using the touch screen printer
control panel 71
using the touch‑screen buttons 73
Utilities menu 165
V
verify print jobs 58, 99
printing from a Macintosh
computer 58, 99
printing from Windows 58, 99
verifying printer setup 34
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 60, 101
volatile memory 64, 105
erasing 65, 106
volatility
statement of 64, 105
W
waste toner bottle
ordering 177
replacing 179
wiping printer hard disk 66
wiping the printer hard disk 107
Wireless menu 137
wireless network
configuration information 28
installation, using Macintosh 31
installation, using Windows 29
wireless network setup
in Windows 29
wireless printer setup
in Macintosh 31
X
XPS menu 166
Index 264
